Menu

Romans 5:16 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

BSAAndkai [is] notou ashōs throughdia oneehis having sinnedhamartanō [the sin of Adam, disobedience] theho gift;dōrēma [free gift, divine gratuity] Thatho indeedmen forgar judgment [was]krima [verdict, condemnation] ofek oneehis [a single transgression] [was] untoeis condemnation,katakrima [guilty verdict, penalty] <the>ho howeverde the giftcharisma [spiritual endowment, unmerited favor] [is] out ofek manypolus trespassesparaptōma [unintentional errors, willful sins] untoeis justification.dikaiōma [righteousness, acquittal]

Word
Listen & take awayRomans 5
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 16 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (dikaiōma) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Romans 5:16quick helps
In a sentencePaul contrasts the effects of Adam's sin with the gift of grace through Christ.
Who is speakingThe Apostle Paul, addressing the Roman believers.
Where we areIn a section discussing the implications of sin and grace.
The hard wordδώρημα
Take awayThe gift of grace is far greater than the condemnation brought by sin.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbἁμαρτάνω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Romans 5:16

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Contrast of Sin and Gracegenerated

15But the gift is not like the trespass. For if the many died by the trespass of the one man, how much more did God’s grace and the gift that came by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ, abound to the many!
16Again, the gift is not like the result of the one man’s sin: The judgment that followed one sin brought condemnation, but the gift that followed many trespasses brought justification.
17For if, by the trespass of the one man, death reigned through that one man, how much more will those who receive an abundance of grace and of the gift of righteousness reign in life through the one man, Jesus Christ!
18So then, just as one trespass brought condemnation for all men, so also one act of righteousness brought justification and life for all men.

Romans 5:16 discusses how the gift of grace given through Jesus Christ is not comparable to the judgment that came from Adam's single sin. Paul emphasizes that while Adam's transgression brought condemnation to many, the grace of God through Christ offers justification for many trespasses. This passage highlights the transformative power of grace in contrast to the consequences of sin, a theme that resonates throughout the epistle to the Romans.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Genesis 3:6–19When the woman saw that the tree was good for food and pleasing to the eyes, and that it was desirable for obtaining wisdom, she took the fruit and ate it. She also gave some to her husband who was with her, and he ate it.
2Galatians 3:10All who rely on works of the law are under a curse. For it is written: “Cursed is everyone who does not continue to do everything written in the Book of the Law.”
3James 2:10Whoever keeps the whole law but stumbles at just one point is guilty of breaking all of it.
4Isaiah 1:18“Come now, let us reason together,” says the LORD. “Though your sins are like scarlet, they will be as white as snow; though they are as red as crimson, they will become like wool.
5Isaiah 43:25I, yes I, am He who blots out your transgressions for My own sake and remembers your sins no more.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 10 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word δώρημα, dōrēmagenerated

The noun δώρημα (dōrēma) means 'gift' and refers specifically to a free gift or divine gratuity. It is derived from the verb δωρέω (to give) and is used in contexts that emphasize generosity without expectation of return.

In this verse, it signifies the unmerited favor of God, contrasting sharply with the judgment that follows sin. The use of this term underscores the nature of God's grace as a gift that brings justification rather than condemnation.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible (BSB) as 'the gift is not like the result of the one man’s sin...' This wording is echoed in the KJV and ASV, which also emphasize the distinction between the gift and the judgment.

However, the BBE uses 'the free giving has not the same effect as the sin of one,' which introduces a different nuance by emphasizing the act of giving rather than the gift itself. This highlights the varying focus among translations on the nature of grace.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is introduced by the conjunction καὶ, linking two contrasting ideas: the gift and the judgment. The finite verb 'is' is implied in the structure, with several phrases elaborating on each aspect.

The sentence includes a prepositional phrase describing the judgment and a noun phrase that identifies the gift, highlighting the contrast between condemnation and justification.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

κρίμα appears in the Septuagint, typically translating the Hebrew for 'judgment' or 'verdict.' It connects to the theme of divine judgment found in the Old Testament, particularly in legal contexts.

δικαίωμα also has roots in the Septuagint, where it relates to God's ordinances and righteousness, emphasizing the continuity of God's justice from the Old to the New Testament.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Romans 5:16 explains that the gift of grace through Jesus is not the same as the judgment that came from Adam's sin. While Adam's sin led to condemnation for many, the grace of God offers justification for many wrongdoings, showing the power of God's gift in contrast to the consequences of sin.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the gift refer to in this verse?

The gift refers to the grace and justification offered through Jesus Christ, contrasting with the condemnation that came from Adam's sin.

How does Adam's sin affect humanity according to this verse?

Adam's sin brought condemnation to many, illustrating the widespread impact of disobedience.

What is the significance of justification in this context?

Justification signifies being declared righteous before God, a gift made possible through Christ's grace, countering the judgment brought by sin.

Why is the comparison between sin and grace important?

This comparison highlights the depth of God's grace and the transformative power it has over the consequences of sin, emphasizing the hope found in Christ.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways have I experienced the gift of grace in my own life?
  2. How can I better understand the contrast between sin and grace?
  3. What does justification mean for my relationship with God?
  4. How can I share the message of grace with others who feel condemned?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers provide insights into Romans 5:16, discussing the contrast between Adam's sin and God's grace through Christ.

John ChrysostomHomily on Romans X c. 347–407
And what is this that he is speaking of? It is that sin had power to bring in death and condemnation; but grace did not do away that one sin only, but also those that followed after in its train.
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →
Theodore of MopsuestiaPAULINE COMMENTARY FROM THE GREEK CHURCH c. 350–428
There is one great difference between Adam’s sin and God’s gift in Christ. Adam’s sin brought punishment on all those who came after him, and so they died. But the free gift is different.
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →
Augustine of HippoAUGUSTINE ON Romans 29 354–430
This is the difference: in Adam one sin was condemned, but by the Lord many sins have been forgiven.
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Romans 5:16 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And not as [it was] by one that sinned, [so is] the gift,.... The apostle goes on with the dissimilitude between the effects of Adam's sin, and Christ's righteousness: for the judgment was by one to

Read John Gill on Romans 5 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And not as it was by one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment was by one to condemnation, but the free gift is of many offences unto justification. And not as [it was] by one that sinned.

Read Robert Jamieson on Romans 5 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

q.d. As there is a difference between Adam and Christ in respect of their persons, so also in respect of their acts, and the extent thereof; for one sin of Adam did condemn us; the mischief arose from one offence; but the free gift and grace of Christ doth absolve us not only from that one fault, but from all other faults and offences; it reacheth to the pardon, not only of original sin, but of all other personal and actual sins.

Read Matthew Poole on Romans 5 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

16 And not as it was by one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment was by one to condemnation, but the free gift is of many offences unto justification. Ver. 16. Of many offences] i.e. Of all, whether imputed to us, inherent in us, or issuing from us,

Read John Trapp on Romans 5 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(16) The judgment was by one.—The judgment, verdict, or sentence from a single case ends in, or in other words takes the form of, condemnation; whereas, on the other hand, the free gift, starting from or prompted by many sins, ends in, takes the form of, justification. In the former of these cases the verdict is “Guilty,” while in the other case it (or, rather, the free act of grace which takes its place) is a verdict of acquittal.

Read Charles John Ellicott on Romans 5 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 16. And not as it was by one that sinned] That is, the judicial act that followed Adam's sin (the sentence of death pronounced upon him, and his expulsion from paradise) took its rise from his one offence alone, and terminated in condemnation; but the free gift of God in Christ takes its rise also from the many offences which men, in a long course of life, have personally committed; and the object of this grace is to justify them freely, and bring them to eternal life.

Read AdamClarke on Romans 5 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

16. And not, &c.] The line of thought here is less difficult if we take Romans 5:17 in close connexion, and read the words from “for the judgment” to “unto justification” as a parenthetic statement of the two facts before us. We may then paraphrase Romans 5:16-17 thus: “The Gift, in wonder and greatness of quality, far exceeds the Ruin, though each is the result of one Person’s act: (for, as we know, the sentence and execution was the result of one man’s one sin, while the atonement and justification is the result, in a sense, of many men’s many sins:)—I say the Gift exceeds the Ruin; for while the result of Adam’s sin was just the lawful reign of death over men as sinners, the result of…

Read Cambridge on Romans 5 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And not ... - This is the second point in which the effects of the work of Christ differ from the sin of Adam The first part Romans 5:15 was, that the evil consequences flowed from the sin of one

Read Albert Barnes on Romans 5 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Again, the gift is not like the result of the one man’s sin: The judgment that followed one sin brought condemnation, but the gift that followed many trespasses brought justification.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

The gift is not as through one who sinned; for the judgment came by one to condemnation, but the free gift followed many trespasses to justification.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Again, the gift is not like the result of the one man’s sin: The judgment that followed one sin brought condemnation, but the gift that followed many trespasses brought justification.

NETBNew English Translation2006

And the gift is not like the one who sinned. For judgment, resulting from the one transgression, led to condemnation, but the gracious gift from the many failures led to justification.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And not as it was by one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment was by one to condemnation, but the free gift is of many offences unto justification.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And not as through one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment came of one unto condemnation, but the free gift came of many trespasses unto justification.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And not as through one that sinned, so is the gift: for the judgment came of one unto condemnation, but the free gift came of many trespasses unto justification.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And not as it was by one that sinned, so is the gift. For the judgment was by one to condemnation, but the free gift is of many offenses to justification.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Neither is the gift so, as that which entred in by one that sinned: for the fault came of one offence vnto condemnation: but the gift is of many offences to iustification.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And [shall] not as by one that has sinned [be] the gift? For the judgment [was] of one to condemnation, but the act of favour, of many offences unto justification.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and not as through one who did sin [is] the free gift, for the judgment indeed [is] of one to condemnation, but the gift [is] of many offences to a declaration of 'Righteous,'

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and not as through one who sinned [is] the free gift, for the judgment indeed [is] of one to condemnation, but the gift [is] of many offenses to a declaration of “Righteous,”

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

For the gift is not like the outcome of that one man's sin. The judgment followed one trespass and brought condemnation, but the gift followed many trespasses and brought justification.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And not as it was by one sin, so also is the gift. For judgment indeed was by one unto condemnation; but grace is of many offences, unto justification.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

The result of the gift is not like that of the sin. The result of Adam's sin was judgment and condemnation, but the gift sets us right with God, despite our many sins.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And the free giving has not the same effect as the sin of one: for the effect of one man's sin was punishment by the decision of God, but the free giving had power to give righteousness to wrongdoers in great number.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἁμαρτήσαντοςhamartanō having sinned G264 2 different renderings
sinnedASV DBY GNV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA WEB
sinsFBV
δώρημα·dōrēma gift; G1434 2 different renderings
giftBSB DBY DRA FBV GNV MSB NETB ULB
free giftASV KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
κρίμαkrima judgment [was] G2917 2 different renderings
condemnationASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
punishmentBBE
πολλῶνpolus many G4183 2 different renderings
manyASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
greatBBE
δικαίωμα.¶dikaiōma justification. G1345 2 different renderings
justificationASV BSB DBY DRA KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
righteousnessBBE

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseadverbialοὐχ[is] notprepositional phrase · predicateὡςasprepositional phraseδι’throughnoun phraseἑνὸςoneἁμαρτήσαντοςhaving sinnednoun phrase · subjectτὸtheδώρημαgiftclauseγὰρforclauseμὲνtrulyclausenoun phrase · subjectτὸTheκρίμαjudgment [was]prepositional phrase · predicateἐξofἑνὸςoneprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰς[was] untoκατάκριμαcondemnationδὲbutclausenoun phrase · subjectτὸ-χάρισμαthe giftprepositional phrase · predicateἐκ[is] out ofnoun phraseπολλῶνmanyπαραπτωμάτωνtrespassesprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςuntoδικαίωμαjustification

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et non sicut per unum peccatum, ita et donum. Nam judicium quidem ex uno in condemnationem : gratia autem ex multis delictis in justificationem.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܠܐ ܐܝܟ ܣܟܠܘܬܐ ܕܚܕ ܗܟܢܐ ܡܘܗܒܬܐ ܕܝܢܐ ܓܝܪ ܕܗܘܐ ܡܢ ܚܕ ܠܚܘܝܒܐ ܗܘܐ ܡܘܗܒܬܐ ܕܝܢ ܡܢ ܚܛܗܐ ܣܓܝܐܐ ܗܘܬ ܠܟܐܢܘ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι᾽ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος τὸ δώρημα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων εἰς δικαίωμα.¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Romans 5:16καίAndAndκαίοὐ[is] not[is] notοὐὡςasasὡςδιάthroughthroughδιάεἷςoneoneεἷςἁμαρτάνωhaving sinnhaving sinnedἁμαρτάνωthetheδώρημαgift;gift;δώρημαThatThatμένindeedindeedμένγάρforforγάρκρίμαjudgment [wjudgment [was]κρίμαἐκofofἐκεἷςoneoneεἷςεἰς[was] unto[was] untoεἰςκατάκριμαcondemnatiocondemnation,κατάκριμα<the><the>δέhoweverhoweverδέχάρισμαthe giftthe giftχάρισμαἐκ[is] out of[is] out ofἐκπολύςmanymanyπολύςπαράπτωμαtrespassestrespassesπαράπτωμαεἰςuntountoεἰςδικαίωμαjustificatijustification.δικαίωμαὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςμηδείςAdj no oneAdj no one, notμηδείςἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαδωρέομαιv. I give,v. I give, granδωρέομαικρίνωv. I judgev. I judge, decκρίνωκατακρίνωv. I condev. I condemnκατακρίνωχαρίζομαιv. I show v. I show favorχαρίζομαιπαραπίπτωv. I fall v. I fall awayπαραπίπτωδικαιόωv. I make v. I make rightδικαιόωμήNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. not, lμήδέCj. but, oCj. but, on theδέμέλοςn.n. a limn.n. a limb, meμέλοςἕκαστοςAdj each, Adj each, everyἕκαστοςδεξιόςAdj on theAdj on the righδεξιόςνεκρόςAdj dead, Adj dead, a corνεκρόςἹεροσόλυμαn.f. & n.nn.f. & n.n. JerἹεροσόλυμαεἰσέρχομαιv. I go inv. I go in, comεἰσέρχομαιἔξεστι(ν)v. it is pv. it is permitἔξεστι(ν)
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Romans 5:16

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
οὐχou [is] not G3756 Particle · negative
1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.
Tyndale gloss
no
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as ), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%not
not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός
ὅς
ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς
οὐ[is] not1622×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐκArticle theἐγώ
μήNeg
παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe
οἶδαI know, remember
ὅτιthat, since, becArticle theτίςIrg
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deArticle the
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ὡςhōs as G5613 Adverb
502× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means as or when, showing a comparison or timing. It's used in many verses, like Mark 4:26 and 1 Corinthians 3:15, to show how things are done. It helps explain how or when something happens.
Tyndale gloss
as/when
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὡς is an adverb and conjunction derived from the relative pronoun ὅς. It is used in various contexts to mean 'as,' 'like,' or 'when,' and can indicate manner, comparison, or time. In the New Testament, it appears frequently to express similarity or to introduce clauses, such as in comparisons or temporal phrases. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.

As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as;

with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mk 4:26, I Co 3:15, Eph 5:28, Ja 2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Ac 8:32, I Co 7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), c. nom., Mt 6:29, al.; c. acc., Mt 19:19, Mk 12:31, al.; c. prep., Mt 26:55, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὡς [ Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 494

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὡς. Ι. = “45: P Goodsp Cairo 44 (ii/B.c.) (= Selections, Ῥ- 24) εἰ tppwoar . .. εἴη dv ὡς αἱρούμεθα, “if you are well, it will be as we desire,” BGU I. 1637 (A.D. 108) καὶ yap ἄλλοι ὡς πληγέντες ὑπὸ αὐτοῦ ἀναφόριον δεδώκασι, “for others have given information (from time to time) ἃ5 having been assaulted by him,” P Flor I. 5618 (A.p. 234) ὡς καθήκει, and BGU IV. το. 1 (iv/y A.D.) κα]ταβληθῆναι ὡς φονέα. 2. = “that,” ‘ how,” after verbs of saying, thinking, etc.: P Tebt I. τοῦ (B.c. 119) φρόντισον ὡς τὰ τῆς ὑποσχέσεως ἐκπληρωθήσεται, “take care that the terms of his agreement are fulfilled” (Edd.), and P Tebt II. 4101? (i/A.D.) μν[ἤ]σθητι o[s] ἐν τῷ Τρ[ιστόμῳ pe ἐφιλοτ[ιυἹμοῦ σὺν ἐμοὶ μεῖναι, ‘remember how zealous you were at Tristomos to remain with me” (Fdd.). 3. Ὁ. ind. with dy, as in Σ Cor 125, cf. P Par 4615 (B.C. 152) ὡς ἂν εὐκαιρήσω, παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρός σε. 4. c. conj. with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὡς (hōs) — as/when.

ὡς:—

Summary:

__A as adverb of Manner.

__A.Aa ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus.

__A.Ab ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. pronoun ὅς, as.

__A.Ac ὡς Relat. and Interrog., how.

__A.Ad ὡς temporal, when.

__A.Ae ὡς Local, where,

__B ὡς, as CONJUNCTION.

__C,D various usages. adverb of Manner:

__A.Aa ὥς, Demonstr., ={οὕτως}, so, thus, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Ionic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥς simply ={οὕτως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδ᾽ ὧς not even so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] are used in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα [Refs 4th c.AD+]; δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Thess. καὶ οὗς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; for this phrase the accentuation ὧς[Refs 2nd…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὡς

hos

probably adverb of comparative from 3739; which how, i.e. in that

manner (very variously used, as follows):--about, after (that),

(according) as (it had been, it were), as soon (as), even as (like),

for, how (greatly), like (as, unto), since, so (that), that, to wit,

unto, when(-soever), while, X with all speed.

see GREEK for 3739

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὡς

Adv

as, like as, how, while, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὡς hōs 504x

conjunction formed from the relative pronoun ὅς, used as a comparative part. and conj., as, correlatively, Mk. 4:26; Jn. 7:46; Rom. 5:15; as, like as, Mt. 10:16; Eph. 5:8; according as, Gal. 6:10; as, as it were, Rev. 8:8; as, Lk. 16:1; Acts 3:12; before numerals, about, Mk. 5:13; conj. that, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὡς thus, as, so that, since

A. ADVERB of Manner, either ὥς (with accent) Demonstr. so, thus, Lat. sic;— or ὡς (without accent) Relat. as, Lat. ut. B. ὡς, as CONJUNCTION. C, D. various usages.

of Manner:

ὥς, Demonstr. = οὕτως, so, thus, Lat. sic, Hom., Hdt.; rare in attic:— καὶ ὥς, even so, nevertheless, οὐδ᾽ ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, in no wise, Hom., Soph.

in Comparisons, ὥς . . , ὡς . . , so . . as . . , Lat. sic . . ut . . , Il., Plat.

thus, for instance, Od.

ὡς, Relat., as, Lat. ut, first in Hom.; οὕτως ὡς, Lat. sic ut; but the antec. is often omitted: similes are commonly introduced by ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ᾽ ὅτε, where ὅτε often seems superfluous, ἤριπε δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] Il.:—this ὡς takes the accent at the end of a clause or when it follows the word dependent on it; θεὸς δ᾽ ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il.; οἱ δὲ φέβοντο, βόες ὥς…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:

(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).

(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%as
as60% · 310×like16% · 84×when8% · 41×how4% · 21×about4% · 20×other renderings6% · 33×other renderings1% · 7×

516 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 22 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial31%predicate12%object4%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 502 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
πρόσωπονthe face, counteπούςthe footδιδάσκωI teach
σύ
πλησίονnear, nearby, a καρδίαthe heart, innerἀποστέλλωI send forth, se
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofteαὐτόςλαόςa people, the cr
ἀλλάbut, except
γαμίζωI give in marriaθέλωI will, wish, deφανερῶςclearly, openly
εἰμίI am, exist
ὥραan hour, seasonὅτιthat, since, becοὐNeg
ὡςas502×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἥλιοςthe sun, sunlighφῶςlight, a source
δέbut, on the other ha
πληρόωI fill, fulfill,γίνομαιI come into beinἀκούωI hear, listen
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐνἐγώ
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
ὕδωρwaterβροντήthunderἐν
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaκρυπτόςhidden, secret

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὡς · 502× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John 2 Corinthians 1 Peter Hebrews Mark Romans Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
δι᾽dia through G1223 Preposition
667× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means through or because of, like in Matthew 2:12 where the wise men left by another route. It shows cause or occasion, as in 1 Corinthians 3:15, being saved through fire. It can also describe a state or condition, like in Romans.
Tyndale gloss
through/because of
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διά (dia) is a preposition meaning 'through' and can govern both the genitive and accusative cases. It covers a range of uses, including indicating motion through space or time, causation, and means or instrumentality. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 2:12 and Romans 8:25. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

διά (before a vowel δ’, exc. Ro 8:10, II Co 5:7, and in pr. names; Tdf., Pr., 94),

prep. c. gen., acc, as in cl.;

c. gen., through;

of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mt 2:12 12:43, Mk 2:23, Lk 4:30, Jo 4:4, II Co 11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, I Co 3:15, I Pe 3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, I Co 13:12; metaph., of a state or condition:

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διὰ παντός [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)], or written together διαπαντός [so GT (exe. in Mt.) ; ef. W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually, always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 24); 2 Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15, (often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a thing is done: διὰ τῆς νυκτός (1, Τ Tr WH διὰ νυκτός), by night, Acts ν. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 1,10); δύ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the space of forty days, Acts i. 3;— (denying this use of the prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; δὲ ἡμερῶν, (some) days…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διά (A.D. 58) ἀπεσχηκυῖαι [παρὰ τοῦ ᾿Αντ]ιφάνους διὰ χειρὸς [ἐϊξ οἴκου ὃ καὶ ἐπε[ίσθη]σαν κεφάλαιον, ‘have received from Antiphanes from hand to hand in cash the sum which they severally consented to accept ” (Edd.). Among other stereotyped phrases may be mentioned διὰ παντός, common in papyri as in Bibl. Greek in place of the obsolescent ἀεί : thus P Lond 42° (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, Selections Ὁ. 9) σοῦ διὰ παντὸς μνείαν ποιούμενοι, LGU IV. 1078* (A.p. 39) Σαραπίων Σαραπιάδι τῇ ἀδελφῇ πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. A rather different temporal use appears in διὰ νυκτός, “by night’ (Ac 519 etc.), as P Ryl II. 1381 (A.D. 34) κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτὸς ἡλμένον ἐξ ὑπερβατῶν els τὠιὸ τῆς οὐσίας ἐποίκιον Δρομήως λεγώμενου (7. ε. -όμενον), “ΕἼ detected him when under cover of night he had sprung into the farmstead” (Edd.): it is hard to imagine Fritzsche (see Grimm) arguing that here…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διά (dia) — through/because of.

διά,

poetry διαί (Aeolic dialect ζά, which see), preposition governing genitive and accusative — Rad. sense, through; never anastrophic [Prop. δῐᾰ: but [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses ῑ at the beginning of a line, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also ᾱ, for the sake of meter, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses διαί in Lyric poetry, [Refs]

__A WITH GEN.

__A.I of Place or Space:

__A.I.1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently of the effect of weapons, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. [Refs 8th c.BC+] out through the Scaean gate, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, see at {διαπρό},{διέκ}: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (i.e.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διά

dia

a primary preposition denoting the channel of an act; through (in very

wide applications, local, causal, or occasional):--after, always,

among, at, to avoid, because of (that), briefly, by, for (cause) ...

fore, from, in, by occasion of, of, by reason of, for sake, that,

thereby, therefore, X though, through(-out), to, wherefore, with

(-in). In composition it retains the same general importance.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διά

Prep.

through, on account of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διά dia 667x

(1) gen., through, used of place or medium, Mt. 7:13; Lk. 6:1; 2 Cor. 11:33; through, of time, during, in the course of, Heb. 2:15; Acts 5:19; through, of immediate agency, causation, instrumentality, by means of, by, Jn. 1:3; Acts 3:18; of means or manner, through, by, with, Lk. 8:4; 2 Cor. 5:7; 8:8; of state or condition, in a state of, Rom.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διά through c. gen. through, by means of c. acc.

through.

WITH GEN.:

of Place or Space:

of motion in a line, through, right through, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε ἔγχος Il.; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, id. Il.; διὰ πάντων ἐλθεῖν to go through all in succession, Xen.

of motion through a space, but not in a line, all through, over, διὰ πεδίοιο Il.; δι᾽ ἄστεος Od.

of Intervals of Space, διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every 10th battlement, Thuc.; διὰ πέντε σταδίων at a distance of 5 stades, Hdt.

of Time:

throughout, during, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.; δι᾽ ἡμέρης all day long, id. Hdt.; διὰ παντός continually, Aesch.; δι᾽ ὀλίγου for a short time, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
57%through
through57% · 391×because of22% · 153×on account of10% · 67×for2% · 14×the sake of2% · 14×other renderings6% · 44×

683 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial96%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 667 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
θεόςGod, a godπᾶςall, the whole, καυματίζωI burn, scorch
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciἐνώπιονbefore the face
θεόςGod, a god
Article theδέbut, on the otheσοφόςwise
σύ
ἐνπρόςδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,εἶπονI say, speakἐνώπιονbefore the face
διάthrough667×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, ὄνομαname, character,προφήτηςa prophet, poet
οὗτος
λέγωI say, speakArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
Article theαἰτίαa cause, reason,καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
Article theγίνομαιI come into beinκαίand, even, also,
τίςIrg
οὐNegArticle theμετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιά · 667× in the New Testament
Romans Acts John Matthew Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Luke Mark Ephesians Galatians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 663 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

ἀρουρῶν ἑπτὰ ἀρούρας τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐν σφραγῖσι δυσίν , ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς ὠνῆς.

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ἑνὸςehis one G1520 Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
336× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for one, used to describe unity or agreement, as seen in John 10:30 and Romans 12:4-5. It emphasizes oneness and togetherness. This concept is key in Christian teachings.
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἷς is a cardinal numeral meaning 'one.' It contrasts with many and can function as a noun or adjective. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as emphasizing unity (e.g., John 10:30) or indicating exclusivity (e.g., Matthew 27:14). The entries note its use in phrases like 'one by one' and as an ordinal meaning 'first.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἷς, μιά, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός,

cardinal numeral, one;

one, as opp. to many: Mt 25:15, Ro 5:12, I Co 10:8, al.; as subst., Ro 5:15, Eph 2:14; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 5:19, al.; seq. ἐκ (ἐξ), Mk 14:18, Jo 6:8, al.; metaph., of union and concord, Jo 10:30 17:11, Ro 12:4, 5, Phl 1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Lk 14:18; c. neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἷς (ehis) — one.

εἷς, μίᾰ, ἕν

(μίη only in late Ionic dialect Prose): genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός:—Epic dialect ἕεις [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect ἧς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Ionic dialect feminine ἴᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter dative (ἰῷ κίον ἤματι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Orig. ἕνς, assim. ἔν (δ) probably in [Refs] Indo-European sem-(compare ὁμός); μία from sm-ί; ἴα is not related to μία, but probably to pronominal stem i-(Latin is), compareἰός.)

1. as a Numeral, εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; strengthened, εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, a single

__A one, one alone,[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b emphatically with a superlative, εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἷς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἷς

heis

(including the neuter (etc.) hen); a primary numeral; one:--a(-n, -ny,

certain), + abundantly, man, one (another), only, other, some. See

also 1527, 3367, 3391, 3762.

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 3367

see GREEK for 3391

see GREEK for 3762

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἷς, μία, ἕν

Adj

one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἱς heis 345x

numeral one, Mt. 10:29, freq.; only, Mk. 12:6; one virtually by union, Mt. 19:5, 6; Jn. 10:30; one and the same, Lk. 12:52; Rom. 3:30; one in respect of office and standing, 1 Cor. 3:8; equivalent to τις, a certain one, Mt. 8:19; 16:14; a, an, Mt. 21:19; Jas. 4:13; εἱς ἕκαστος, each one, every one, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSM — Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%one
one93% · 334×other renderings5% · 19×other renderings2% · 6×

359 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial24%object20%predicate20%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 336 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
Article theγάρforδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
δεξιόςon the right hanπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveπωλέωI sell
ἐν
γίνομαιI come into beinδέbut, on the otheγάρfor
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπροσέρχομαιI come near, conἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
εἷςone336×
what comes after →
Article the
δώδεκαIndecμικρόςlittle, smallθεόςGod, a god
ἐκ
Article theαὐτόςδεξιόςon the right han
ἕκαστοςeach, every one
αὐτόςArticle theκατά
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐκ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΜωϋσῆςMosesἨλίαςElijah

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἷς · 336× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Acts Romans Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 444 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν μζ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα χαλκοῦ ταλάντου ἑνός . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην Πετεσοῦχος ὁ ἀποδόμενος ὃν ἐδέξατο

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ἁμαρτήσαντοςhamartanō having sinned G264 Verb · aorist · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
43× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To sin or miss the mark is the meaning of this word, as seen in Matthew 18:25 and Romans 3:23. It involves falling short of God's standards or making a mistake, often with moral implications. This concept is central to the Bible's teachings on human nature and redemption.
Amplified meaning
the sin of Adam, disobedience
Tyndale gloss
to sin
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἁμαρτάνω (i.e., *hamartano*) means to miss the mark, often used metaphorically to signify sin or wrongdoing. It is derived from the root meaning to miss and encompasses a range of meanings from failing to achieve a goal to violating God's law. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 18:25 and Romans 3:23, highlighting its moral implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἁμαρτάνω

(pres. formed from aor. ἁμαρτεῖν),

[in LXX for חטא, also for אשׁם, רשׁע, etc.;]

to miss the mark (Hom., Æsch., al.), hence metaph. (Hom., al.), to err, do wrong.

In LXX and NT, to violate God's law, to sin (for non-Christian exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 18:25 27:4, Lk 17:3, Jo 5:14 8:11 9:2, 3, Ro 2:12 3:23 5:12, 14,16 6:15, I Co 7:28,36 15:34, Eph 4:26, I Ti 5:20, Tit 3:11, He 3:17 10:26,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἁμαρτάνω ; fut. ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; in the latter pass. LT Tr WH give ἁμαρτήσωμεν for RG ἁμαρτήσομεν), in class. Grk. ἁμαρτήσομαι; 1 aor. (later) ἡμάρτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (ef. W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ἥμαρτον; pf. ἡμάρτηκα; (ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. and μείρω. peipopat, μέρος, prop. to be without a share in, sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311, ete.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. II. 10, 372; 4,491; τοῦ σκοποῦ, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; τῆς ὁδοῦ, Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, to door go wrong. [Even the Sept., although the Hebr. son also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve duapt. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense, they avail…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἁμαρτάνω. It will be convenient to give (non-Christian) citations for this important word fully. In a private letter of the time of Augustus the writer complains—éy@ μὲν οὐ δοκῶι ἄξιος εἶναι ὑβρίζεσθαι .. . οὐδὲ γὰρ ἡμάρτηκά τι εἰς σέ (cf. Ac 25%, etc.), BGU IV. 11414: cf. 1. δ ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἐπιστολῇ οὐθὲν ἁμάρτημα ever (1. ἔνι -- ἔνεστι).. BGU III. 846 (i/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93, Documents, p. 259) is an illiterate appeal from Antonius Longus to his mother entreating her to be reconciled to him. He makes his daily prayer to Serapis for her, etc.—Aouroy οἶδα τί αἰμαυτῷ παρέσχημαι, παιπαίδδευμαι καθ᾽ ὃν δὴ (corrected from δὶ) τρόπον, οἶδα, ὅτι ἡμάρτηκα (1. ro ff.), ““ But I know I have been punished with what I have brought upon myself, in a way that I know, for I have sinned”: cf. Lk 1518 #1 In the interesting rescript of an Emperor to the Jews, P Par 685°f-, we read, καὶ yap τοὺς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἁμαρτάνω (hamartanō) — to sin.

ἁμαρτάνω [ᾰμ.. ᾰν]:

future ἁμαρτήσομαι[Refs 8th c.BC+] later -ήσω [NT+2nd c.AD+], (δι-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], (ἐξ-) [Refs]Acut. (Sp.)[Refs]aorist 2 ἥμαρτον[Refs 6th c.BC+], Attic dialect; Epic dialect ἤμβροτον, but only indicative; Aeolic dialect 3rd.pers.singular ἄμβροτε[Refs 7th c.BC+], infinitive ἀμβρότην[Refs]; optative ἁμάρτοιν (for ἁμάρτοιμι) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἡμάρτησα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἡμάρτηκα[Refs 5th c.BC+], Attic dialect:—passive, aorist ἡμαρτήθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἡμάρτημαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἡμάρτητο[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—miss the mark, especially of spear thrown, absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἁ. τῆς ὁδοῦ miss road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἁμαρτάνω

hamartano

perhaps from 1 (as a negative particle) and the base of 3313;

properly, to miss the mark (and so not share in the prize), i.e.

(figuratively) to err, especially (morally) to sin:--for your faults,

offend, sin, trespass.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 3313

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἁμαρτάνω

v.

I sin

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἁμαρτάνω hamartanō 43x

pr. to miss a mark; to be in error, 1 Cor. 15:34; Tit. 3:11; to sin, Jn. 5:14; to be guilty of wrong, Mt. 18:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἁμαρτάνω Root ΑΜΑΡΤ to miss, miss the mark, c. gen., ἑκὼν ἡμάρτανε φωτός he missed the man on purpose, Il.; ἁμ. τῆς ὁδοῦ to miss the road, Ar.; τοῦ σκοποῦ Antipho.

generally, to fail of doing, fail of one's purpose, to miss one's point, fail, go wrong, Od., etc.; c. gen., νοήματος ἤμβροτεν failed in hitting upon the thought, id. Od., etc.; ἁμ. τοῦ χρησμοῦ to mistake it, Hdt.

to fail of having, i. e. to be deprived of, lose, c. gen., ἁμαρτήσεσθαι ὀπωπῆς that I should lose my sight, Od.; ἁμ. πιστῆς ἀλόχου Eur.

to fail, do wrong, err, sin, Hom., etc.; c. dat. modi, γνώμῃ ἁμ. to err in judgment, Hdt.; or ἐν λόγοις id. Hdt., Plat.; with a neut. adj., τόδε γ᾽ ἤμβροτον I erred in this, Od.; in Prose, ἁμ. περί τι ἁμ. περί τι to do wrong in a matter, Plat.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-GSM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
16%sinning
sinning16% · 7×having sinned9% · 4×do sin9% · 4×have sinned7% · 3×sinned7% · 3×shall sin7% · 3×sins5% · 2×i have sinned5% · 2×other renderings35% · 15×

43 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb93%object5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 43 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
γαμέωI marryπαρθένοςa virginποιέωI do, make
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,Article theἵναin order that, s
Article the
οὐχίIrgπᾶςall, the whole, ζωήlife
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐάνCondοὕτωthus, so, in thi
πατήρfather, Father, ance
αὐτός
ἁμαρτάνωhaving sinned43×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theἐγώσύ
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherδώρημαa gift, bountyἥλιοςthe sun, sunligh
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐάνCondὑστερέωI am lacking, faκολαφίζωI strike with th
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὐNegἐκ
οὐNeg
φείδομαιI spare, abstainὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἁμαρτάνω · 43× in the New Testament
1 John 1 Corinthians Romans John Luke Matthew Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Peter Acts Ephesians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 127 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.35c. AD 40

τάχα δὲ μηδὲ ἁμαρτάνειν φήσει τὸ παράπαν, εἴ γε τὰ ἀκούσια καὶ κατὰ ἄγνοιαν οὐδὲ ἀδικημάτων ἔχειν λόγον φασί τινες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.180c. AD 75–95

μόνος γὰρ οὗτος δοῦναί τε ταῦτα τοῖς ἀξίοις καὶ ἀφελέσθαι τῶν ἁμαρτανόντων εἰς αὐτὸν ἱκανός, ᾧ παρέχοντες ἑαυτοὺς οἵους αὐτός τε βούλεται κἀγὼ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτοῦ σαφῶς ἐξεπιστάμενος παραινῶ, οὐκ ἂν ὄντες μακαριστοὶ καὶ ζηλωτοὶ πᾶσιν ἀτυχήσαιτέ ποτʼ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.10c. AD 100

λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
τὸho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
δώρημα·dōrēma gift; G1434 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A free gift is something given without expectation of return, like the gift of righteousness in Romans 5:16 or the good gifts from above in James 1:17.
Amplified meaning
free gift, divine gratuity
Tyndale gloss
free gift
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δώρημα (dōrēma) is a neuter noun meaning a gift or present, derived from the verb δωρέω (to give). It encompasses the idea of a free gift or boon, as seen in Romans 5:16 and James 1:17. The term is used in various contexts, including sacrifices or offerings to the Temple treasury, and has a range of literary references from classical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** δώρημα, -τος, τό

(< δωρέω),

[in LXX: Si 31 (34):18* ;]

a gift, boon: Ro 5:16, Ja 1:17.†

SYN.: v.s. δόμα.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δώρημα. PSI I. 2038 (magic—? jiv/A.p.) δότε καί μοι χάριτα καὶ τιμὴν ἔπροσθεν (/. ἔμπ---) πάντω[ν] καὶ τἀγαθὰ ϑορήματα. P Oxy V. 841, p. 37, has a scholion (mid. ii/a.p.) by which Pindar’s βιόδωρον ἀμαχανίας ἄκος is glossed as δώρημα τῷ βίῳ. The same use of the dat. appears in the new fragment of the Oenews (Ὁ) of Euripides, P Hib. I. 4° ἀδ]ελφ[ῶ]ι Μελ[ε]άγρωι δίωρ]ήματα. An acrostic oracle, Awile/ 1039! (Lycia), has the line Νεικηφόρον δώρημα τὸν χρησμὸν τελεῖ, which the ed. explains as telling him who draws this line ‘* ubi largitus eris, quod cupis consequeris.” δῶρον. In P Lond 429 (c. A.D. 350) (=I. p. 314 f.) we have a long account of δῶρα made on the occasion of various | festivals, which the editor thinks are to be regarded as δωρον 1 If so, we may compare the similar use in the inserr., 6. g GIS 407 βασιλεὺς ᾿Ιούλιος ᾿Εἰπιφάνης Φιλόπαππος Δεσποίν[αι] καὶ Σωτίρα[ι] δῶρον. ἐπὶ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώρημα (dōrēma) — free gift.

δώρ-ημα, ατος, τό,

gift, present, [NT+5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώρημα

dorema

from 1433; a bestowment:--gift.

see GREEK for 1433

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώρημα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a gift, bounty

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώρημα dōrēma 2x

a gift, free gift, Rom. 5:16; Jas. 1:17*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώρημα δώρημα, ατος, τό, that which is given, a gift, present, Hdt., Trag.

from δωρέω

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gift (mattanah, minchah, shochadh; doron, dorea, chairisma): In Ge 25:6; Ex 28:38; Nu 18:6,7,29; Eze 20:26, etc., mattanah, "a gift," is so rendered; minchah, an offering or present, used especially of the "meat offerings," is translated "gift" (2Sa 8:2,6 the King James Version; 2Ch 26:8), in which passages "tribute" is meant, as the Revised Version (British and American); 32:23; Ps 45:12. A few other words occur singly, e.g. 'eshkar, "a reward" (Ps 72:10)…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Gift

(1.) An gratuity (Prov. 19:6) to secure favour (18:16; 21:14), a thank-offering (Num. 18:11), or a dowry (Gen. 34:12).

(2.) An oblation or proppitatory gift (2Sa 8:2,6; 1Ch 18:2,6; 2Ch 26:8; Ps. 45:12; 72:10).

(3.) A bribe to a judge to obtain a favourable verdict (Ex. 23:8; Deut. 16:19).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The giving and receiving of presents has in all ages been not only a more frequent but also a more formal and significant proceeding in the East than among ourselves. We cannot adduce a more remarkable proof of the important part which presents play in the social life of the East than the fact that the Hebrew language possesses no less than fifteen different expressions for the one idea. The mode of presentation was with as much parade as possible. The refusal of a present was regarded us a high indignity. No less an insult was it not to bring a present when the position of the parties demanded it. (1 Samuel 10:27)

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%gift
gift100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἁμαρτάνωI sin
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
καίand, even, also,
δώρημαgift;
what comes after →
Article the
μένDisj
τέλειοςperfect, full-grown
ἄνωθενfrom above, from

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώρημα · 2× in the New Testament
James Romans
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Unchangeableness of God 5c. AD 40

τούτου γίνεται μαθητρὶς καὶ διάδοχος Ἄννα, τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ δώρημα σοφίας·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.318c. AD 75–95

ἀνθʼ ὧν προευλογῆσαι τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δύναμιν, ᾧ μελήσει καὶ πρὸς τὸ μέλλον ὑμῶν, ἀπαλλασσόμενος καλῶς ἔχειν ἡγησάμην, αὐτός τε ταύτην ὀφειλομένην ἀμοιβὴν ἀποδιδοὺς καὶ καταλείπων εἰς μνήμην ὑμῖν τὸ σέβειν τε καὶ τιμᾶν προσήκειν τοῦτον ὑμῖν καὶ τοὺς…

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
τὸho That G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
That19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
μὲνmen indeed G3303 Particle
180× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'on the other hand' and is often used to contrast ideas. It appears in the New Testament, like in John and Romans, to show a difference between two things. It's usually translated as 'even' or 'indeed'.
Tyndale gloss
on the other hand
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μέν is a particle that typically indicates a contrast with a following clause, often paired with δέ. It can express certainty or affirmation, but is frequently left untranslated. In the New Testament, it appears in various constructions, such as ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ (the one ... the other) and τοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ (partly ... partly). Its usage is less common than in classical Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέν,

conjunctive particle (originally a form of μήν), usually related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, and distinguishing the word or clause with which it stands from that which follows.

It is generally untranslatable and is not nearly so frequent in NT as in cl. Like δέ, it never stands first in a clause.

Answered by δέ or some other particle: μὲν . . . δέ, indeed . . . but, Mt 3:11, Lk 3:16, al.; with pronouns, ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, one . . . another, Mt 21:35, al.; pl., Phl 1:16, 17; ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δὲ . . . ὃ δέ, some . . . some . . . some, Mt 13:8; τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο δέ, partly . . . partly, He…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, indeed, —its affirmative force being weakened, yet retained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μέν ‘confirmative’; ef. 4 Mace. xviii. 18). Owing to this its original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms and phrases with which it is connected, and thus contrasts them with or distinguishes ther. from others. Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which stands related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, either expressed or understood, and in a sentence composed of several members is so placed as to point out the first member, to which a second, marked by an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corresponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέν, an untranslatable particle, was originally a form of μήν (g.v.). The correlation μὲν... δέ, so common in classical Greek, is largely reduced in the NT (cf. Blass Gr. p. 266 f.). For μέν solitartum, i.e. μέν followed by no contrasting particle, as in Rom 1® πρῶτον μέν, a/., cf. BGU 11. 423? (ii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) πρὸ μὲν πάντων εὔχομαί oe ὑγιαίνειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ἐρωμένον (1. ἐρρωμένον) εὐτυχεῖν," 5 γράψον μοι ἐπιστόλιον πρῶτον μὲν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου, δεύτερον περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀδελφῶν pov. The combination μὲν οὖν in narrative, summing up what precedes, or introducing what follows (Ac 18, 9%, αἰ. : cf. Blass Gr. p. 273), is seen in such passages as P Petr II. 13 (19) (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski?, p. 19) μάλιστα μὲν οὖν τῆν πᾶσαν σπουδὴν πόησαι [το]ῦ ἀφεθῆναί σε διὰ τέλους, P Lille I. 26? (111,8...) (= Witkowski, p. 49) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς τὴν σησαμείαν γῆς, μάλιστα δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέν (men) — on the other hand.

μέν,

Particle, used partly to express certainty on the part of the speaker or writer; partly, and more commonly, to point out that the word or clause with which it stands is correlative to another word or clause that is to follow, the latter word or clause being introduced by δέ.

__A

__A.I μέν used absolutely to express certainty, not followed by correlative δέ, indeed, of a truth, synonymous with μήν, as appears from the Epic dialect and Ionic dialect form ἦ μέν in protestations and oaths (where Attic dialect used ἦ μήν), καί μοι ὄμοσσον, ἦ μ. μοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Trag., ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε τῆς περιρρύτου χθονός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γε μέν, compare γε [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέν

men

a primary particle; properly, indicative of affirmation or concession

(in fact); usually followed by a contrasted clause with 1161 (this

one, the former, etc.):--even, indeed, so, some, truly, verily. Often

compounded with other particles in an intensive or asseverative sense.

see GREEK for 1161

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέν

Disj.prt.

truly, indeed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέν men 179x

a particle serving to indicate that the term or clause with which it is used stands distinguished from another, usually in the sequel, and then mostly with δέ correspondent, Mt. 3:11; 9:39; Acts 1:1; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, this ... that, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; one ... another, οἱ μὲν ... οἱ δέ, some ... others, Matt 22:5; ὅλλος μὲν ... ὅλλος δέ, one ... another, pl. some ... others, Matt 13:8; 21:35; ὅλλος μὲν ... ὅλλος δέ, one ... another, 1 Cor. 15:39; ὡδε μὲν ... ἐκεῖ δέ, here ... there, Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέν Particle, used to shew that the word or clause with which it stands answers to a following word or clause, which is introduced by δέ. Generally, μέν and δέ may be rendered on the one hand, on the other hand, or as well . . , as, while or whereas, but it is often necessary to leave μέν untranslated.

μέν is not always answered by δέ, but by other equiv. Particles, as ἀλλά, ἀτάρ or αὐτάρ, αὖ, αὖθις, αὖτε; also πρῶτον μέν, εἶτα Soph.; πρῶτον μέν, ἔπειτα id. Soph.; πρῶτον μέν, μετὰ τοῦτο Xen.

the answering clause with δέ is sometimes left to be supplied, ὡς μὲν λέγουσι as indeed they say, (but as I believe not), Eur.; this isolated μέν is often a Pron., ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα I for my part, (whatever others may say), Xen.; οὗτος μέν Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%indeed
indeed95% · 185×other renderings5% · 9×

194 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%predicate3%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 180 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςπειρασμόςtrial, testing,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςποιέωI do, make
ἐγώ
σύἸωάννηςJohnκαίand, even, also,
εἰCond
ἸουδαῖοςJewishκαίand, even, also,
πρῶτοςSup
τρόποςway, manner, chaἈβραάμPropσοφίαwisdom
μένindeed180×
what comes after →
οὖνtherefore, then
καίand, even, also,στρατιώτηςa soldierδιασπείρωI scatter like s
γάρfor
Article theγνωστόςknown, an acquaiἴδιοςone’s own, priva
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thφωνήa sound, noise, ἁμαρτίαa sin
εἰμίI am, exist
ΠαῦλοςPaulArticle theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐκ
Article theδεξιόςon the right hanἀγάπηlove

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέν · 180× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew Romans Luke 2 Corinthians John Mark Philippians 1 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐν ἀρούραις ἑπτὰ καὶ τοῦ προσόντος χαλάσματος ἐν σφραγῖσι δυσίν , ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πελαίου

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

πεδίωι Παθύρεως σφραγίδων τριῶν , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πα-νᾶτος τοῦ Πατῆτος, μιᾶς μὲν γείτονες νότου γῆ Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
γὰρgar for G1063 Conjunction
1,038× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
For is a word used to explain or give a reason, often introducing a justification or clarification, as seen in Matthew 4:18 and Romans 7:1. It's a conjunction that connects ideas and provides additional information.
Tyndale gloss
for
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γάρ (gar) is a coordinating particle primarily used to introduce reasons or explanations, similar to 'for' in English. It can serve various functions, including causal, explicative, and conclusive, and is often placed after the first word in a clause. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts that clarify or justify preceding statements, aligning with its classical usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γάρ,

co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα,

verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.;

explicative and epexegetic: Mt 4:18 19:12, Mk 1:16 5:42 16:4, Lk 11:30, Ro 7:1, I Co 16:5, al.

Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mt 9:5 27:23, Lk 9:25 22:27, Jo 9:30, Ac 8:31 16:37 19:35,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ and dpa (i. 4. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirmation and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily as the case stands, “ the thing is first aflirmed by the particle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 232; οἵ. Kiihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415) sq-]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently the reason and nature of something previously mentioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use of this particle, either the reason and cause of a foregoing statement is added, whence arises the causal or argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is explained, whence γάρ takes on an ex plicative force: YP Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmilich). Thus the force of the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γάρ (gar) — for.

γάρ

(γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles.

I. introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα.. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs]

I. b in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον.. ὁ Ζεὺς γ... [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι.. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γάρ

gar

a primary particle; properly, assigning a reason (used in argument,

explanation or intensification; often with other particles):--and, as,

because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then,

therefore, verily, what, why, yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γάρ

Cj.

for

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γάρ gar 1x

for; it is, however, frequently used with an ellipsis of the clause to which it has reference, and its force must then be variously expressed: Mt. 15:27; 27:23, et al.; it is also sometimes epexegetic, or introductory of an intimated detail of circumstances, now, then, Mt. 1:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γάρ for, Lat. enim, and like it, regularly placed after the first word of a sentence: to introduce the reason:

ARGUMENTATIVE, to introduce the reason for a statement, which usually precedes:—when it precedes the statement, it may be rendered since, as, Ἀτρείδη, πολλοὶ γὰρ τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί, χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι Il.

the statement of which γάρ gives the reason may be omitted, οὐ γάρ τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc., Soph.; ἔστι γὰρ οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly, Plat.; οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί: τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, Eur.: —in Conditional Propositions, where the Condition is omitted, it may be transl. for otherwise, else, οὐ γὰρ ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν, (sc. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον)…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%for
for97% · 1050×other renderings3% · 33×

1,083 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,038 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςἐγώσύ
οὐNeg
οὐδείςno one, none, noαὐτόςλαλέωI speak, say
εἰμίI am, exist
θάλασσαthe sea, lakeλυπέωI pain, grieve, καθεύδωI sleep, am slee
οὗτος
εἰςαὐτόςδιά
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existκύριοςlord, Lord, mastἐγώ
γάρfor1038×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godArticle the
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theσύἐν
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becἐνοὐNeg
αὐτός
Article theοὗτοςλέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theδιάἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγάρ · 1,038× in the New Testament
Romans Matthew 1 Corinthians Luke Hebrews Acts 2 Corinthians John Mark Galatians 1 Thessalonians Revelation

1 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ δυνάμεων ἱκανῶν πρὸς τὸ καταστεῖλαι τοὺς ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος

P.Bad. 2 16Pathyris89 BC

ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ τῶν ἐπάνω

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
κρίμαkrima judgment [was] G2917 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Judgment means a decision made for or against someone, like in a court. In the Bible, it often refers to God's judgment, as seen in Romans 2:2 and 2 Peter 2:3. It can also mean condemnation or damnation.
Amplified meaning
verdict, condemnation
Tyndale gloss
judgment
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κρίμα (krima) is derived from κρίνω (krino) and primarily means 'judgment' or 'decision.' It encompasses various contexts, including legal decisions, condemnations, and God's judgment, appearing in several New Testament verses such as Matthew 7:2 and Romans 2:2. Some lexicons note its use in a forensic sense, while others emphasize its theological implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κρίμα (Bl., § 27, 2), -τος, τό

(< κρίνω),

[in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁפָּט;]

the issue of a judicial process, hence,

judgment, the decision passed on the faults of others: Mt 7:2; in forensic sense, c. gen. pun., Lk 24:20; esp. of the judgment of God, Ro 2:2 5:16 11:33 (ICC, in l.), II Pe 2:3, Ju 4; κ. λαμβάι εσθαι, Mt 23:13 (Rec., R, mg.), Mk 12:40, Lk 20:47, Ro 13:2, Ja 3:1; ἔχειν, I Ti…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κρίμα [ἃ TWH] or κρῖμα [L Tr (more commonly) ] (on the accent οἵ. W. p. 50; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to κρίμα, as do Bttm. 73 (64); Cobet (N. T. ad fid. ete. p. 49 sq.); Fritzsche (Rom. vol. i. 96,107); al.; “videtur ζ antiquitati Graecae, i Alexandrinae aetati placuisse,” ΤᾺ Proleg. to Sept.ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see Tif. Proleg. p.101; ef. esp. Lobeck, Paralip. p. 418]),-ros, τό, (fr. κρίνω, 4. ν.; a8 κλίμα fr. κλίνω), [ Aeschyl. down], Sept. very often for yaw; 1. adecree: plur., rod θεοῦ, Ro. xi. 33 [4]. here (with A. V.) judgments; cf. Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. exviii. (exix.) 75). 2. judgment; i. 6. condemnation of wrong, the decision (whether severe or mild) which one passes on the faults of others: κρίματί τινι κρίνειν, Mt. vii. 2. In a forensic sense, the sentence of a judge: with a gen. of the punishment to which…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κρίμα. Κρίμα (on the accent, see Proleg. p. 46) = ‘‘legal decision” is found in P Petr III. 267(iii/B.c.) το]ὺς τοπάρχ[ςους] κρίματα καθήκει εἰς τοὺς φόρους, ‘it is (not) the duty of the Toparchs to give decisions regarding the taxes” (Edd.), 76. 36 (a) verso (iii/B.C.) δεήσει συντελεῖσθαι τὰ κατὰ τὸ [κρίμα] ἐὰν δέηι κρίμα, “(the dioiketes) shall require the legal decision to be carried out, if such a decision be necessary’’ (Edd.). Cf. also the restoration in OGZS 33510 (ii/i B.c.), where αὐτ[οὶ ἐ]πιδεξάμενοι τὴν κρίσιν [is followed after an hiatus by ἐφε]να[ι τὰ κρίματα ἑαυτοῖς. From denoting ‘‘judgment,” ‘‘sentence,”’ the word came to denote the ‘‘offence ” for which one is sentenced, and hence in ΜΟΥ is frequently used = ‘‘sin,” as in the song entitled ‘‘ The Confessor,” where the penitent asks—£opoAdya pe, TA κρίματά pov para pe, “‘confess me; ask me about my sins,” and receives…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κρίμα (krima) — judgment.

κρίμα, ατος, τό,

(κρίνω) decision, judgement, [NT+3rd c.BC+]; verdict on a literary work, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. decree, resolution, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. legal decision, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; decision of arbitrators, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; especially sentence, condemnation, [LXX+NT]

II. matter for judgement, question, [Refs 5th c.BC+].

II.2. law-suit, [LXX+NT]

III. ={κρίσις}, judging, judgement, NT.John.9.39, [NT], etc. [ῖ in A. [prev. cited] (nisi to be read κρεῖμα): ῐ in post-classical poetry; frequently written κρίμα in codices]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κρίμα

krima

from 2919; a decision (the function or the effect, for or against

("crime")):--avenge, condemned, condemnation, damnation, + go to law,

judgment.

see GREEK for 2919

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κρίμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a judgment, verdict, lawsuit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κρίμα krima 27x

judgment; a sentence, award, Mt. 7:2; a judicial sentence, Lk. 23:40; 24:20; Rom. 2:2; 5:16; an adverse sentence, Mt. 23:14; Rom. 13:2; 1 Tim. 5:12; Jas. 3:1; judgment, administration of justice, Jn. 9:39; Acts 24:25; execution of justice, 1 Pet. 4:17; a lawsuit; 1 Cor. 6:7; in NT…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Is put, in Mt 5:21,22, for a court of judgment, a tribunal, namely, the tribunal of seven judges, which Josephus mentions as existing in every city, and which decided causes of minor importance. See under SYNAGOGUE.

For the expression, "judgment-hall," see PRETORIUM.

THE DAY OF JUDGMENT, for which the word "judgment" alone is sometimes used, is that great day, at the end of the world and of time, when Christ shall sit as judge over all the universe, and when every individual of the human race will be judged and recompensed according to his works, whether they be good or evil. The time of its coming and its duration are known only to God. It will break upon the world suddenly, and with a glorious but awful majesty. It will witness the perfect vindication of all the ways of God. The revelation of his justice, appalling but unstained…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ THE GENERAL 1Ch 16:33; Job 14:17; 21:30; 31:13-15; Ps 9:7; 50:3-6; 96:13; 98:9; Ec 3:17; 11:9; 12:14; Eze 18:20-28; Da 7:9,10; Am 4:12; Mt 3:12; 7:22,23; 8:29; 10:15; 11:22; 12:36,37,41,42; 13:30,40-43,49,50; 16:27; 22:11-13; 23:14; 25:1-46; Mr 4:22; 8:38; 13:32; Lu 3:17; 10:10-14; 11:31,32; 12:2-5; 13:24-29; 19:12-26; 20:45-47;

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 138 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Preliminary Studies 86c. AD 40

τὰ κρίματά μου ποιήσετε, καὶ τὰ προστάγματά μου φυλάξεσθε, πορεύεσθε ἐν αὐτοῖς·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 11.2c. AD 96

συνεξελθούσης γὰρ αὐτῷ τῆς γυναικὸς ἑτερογνώμονος ὑπαρχούσης καὶ οὐκ ἐν ὁμονοίᾳ, εἰς τοῦτο σημεῖον ἐτέθη, ὥστε γενέσθαι αὐτὴν στήλην ἁλὸς ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, εἰς τὸ γνωστὸν εἶναι πᾶσιν, ὅτι οἱ δίψυχοι καὶ οἱ διστάζοντες περὶ τῆς τοῦ θεοῦ δυνάμεως…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.11.1c. AD 110

λοιπὸν αἰσχυνθῶμεν, φοβηθῶμεν τὴν μακροθυμίαν τοῦ θεοῦ, ἵνα μὴ ἡμῖν εἰς κρίμα γένηται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Petr. 3 36 a VoArsinoites219 BC

τῶν ἀποδεδειγμένων ἐπισκόπων, οἷς ἂν ὁ διοικητὴς συντάσσηι ἢ δεήσει συντελεῖσθαι τὰ κατὰ τὸ κρίμα. ἐὰν δὲ ἦι κρίμα ἃ πρὸς Δημήτρίον καὶ Ἀπολλώνιον συνγέγραφα ἐπὶ Διονυσιοδώρου τοῦ ἐπιμελητεύσαντος

JJP 18 (1974), p. 52Tanyaithis (Apollonopolites Heptakomias)AD 113–AD 120

ι τῶι πέρυσι ἐνιαυτῶι … ἀδικεῖν αὐτοὺς καὶ εφρ … … … … ο κρίματος ὠνειδι … … παστοφόρους ὄντας καὶ παρεγ … … … οσου καὶ Κλαυδίου Ἀγριππείνου

P.Oxy. 47 3361OxyrhynchosAD 154–AD 161

θεοῦ Τραιανοῦ Παρθικοῦ υἱωνὸς θεοῦ Νέρουα ἔκγονος Τίτος Αἴλιος Ἁδριανὸς Ἀντωνεῖνος Σεβαστὸς Εὐσεβὴς τὸ κρίμα ἀπεφανόμην παραλημφθεῖσιν Μάρκῳ Αὐρηλίῳ Οὐήρῳ Καίσαρι καὶ Λουκίῳ Αὐρηλίῳ Κομμόδῳ υἱοῖς μου καὶ τοῖς

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ἐξek of G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκof913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ἑνὸςehis one G1520 Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
336× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for one, used to describe unity or agreement, as seen in John 10:30 and Romans 12:4-5. It emphasizes oneness and togetherness. This concept is key in Christian teachings.
Amplified meaning
a single transgression
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἷς is a cardinal numeral meaning 'one.' It contrasts with many and can function as a noun or adjective. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as emphasizing unity (e.g., John 10:30) or indicating exclusivity (e.g., Matthew 27:14). The entries note its use in phrases like 'one by one' and as an ordinal meaning 'first.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἷς, μιά, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός,

cardinal numeral, one;

one, as opp. to many: Mt 25:15, Ro 5:12, I Co 10:8, al.; as subst., Ro 5:15, Eph 2:14; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 5:19, al.; seq. ἐκ (ἐξ), Mk 14:18, Jo 6:8, al.; metaph., of union and concord, Jo 10:30 17:11, Ro 12:4, 5, Phl 1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Lk 14:18; c. neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἷς (ehis) — one.

εἷς, μίᾰ, ἕν

(μίη only in late Ionic dialect Prose): genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός:—Epic dialect ἕεις [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect ἧς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Ionic dialect feminine ἴᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter dative (ἰῷ κίον ἤματι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Orig. ἕνς, assim. ἔν (δ) probably in [Refs] Indo-European sem-(compare ὁμός); μία from sm-ί; ἴα is not related to μία, but probably to pronominal stem i-(Latin is), compareἰός.)

1. as a Numeral, εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; strengthened, εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, a single

__A one, one alone,[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b emphatically with a superlative, εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἷς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἷς

heis

(including the neuter (etc.) hen); a primary numeral; one:--a(-n, -ny,

certain), + abundantly, man, one (another), only, other, some. See

also 1527, 3367, 3391, 3762.

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 3367

see GREEK for 3391

see GREEK for 3762

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἷς, μία, ἕν

Adj

one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἱς heis 345x

numeral one, Mt. 10:29, freq.; only, Mk. 12:6; one virtually by union, Mt. 19:5, 6; Jn. 10:30; one and the same, Lk. 12:52; Rom. 3:30; one in respect of office and standing, 1 Cor. 3:8; equivalent to τις, a certain one, Mt. 8:19; 16:14; a, an, Mt. 21:19; Jas. 4:13; εἱς ἕκαστος, each one, every one, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSM — Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%one
one93% · 334×other renderings5% · 19×other renderings2% · 6×

359 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial24%object20%predicate20%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 336 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
Article theγάρforδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
δεξιόςon the right hanπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveπωλέωI sell
ἐν
γίνομαιI come into beinδέbut, on the otheγάρfor
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπροσέρχομαιI come near, conἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
εἷςone336×
what comes after →
Article the
δώδεκαIndecμικρόςlittle, smallθεόςGod, a god
ἐκ
Article theαὐτόςδεξιόςon the right han
ἕκαστοςeach, every one
αὐτόςArticle theκατά
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐκ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΜωϋσῆςMosesἨλίαςElijah

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἷς · 336× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Acts Romans Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 444 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν μζ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα χαλκοῦ ταλάντου ἑνός . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην Πετεσοῦχος ὁ ἀποδόμενος ὃν ἐδέξατο

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
εἰςeis [was] unto G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰς[was] unto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
κατάκριμα,katakrima condemnation, G2631 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A guilty verdict or condemnation, like in Romans 5:16 and 8:1 where it talks about the penalty of sin. It refers to the judgment against someone.
Amplified meaning
guilty verdict, penalty
Tyndale gloss
condemnation
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κατάκριμα (katakrima) is derived from κατακρίνω (katakrinō) and means condemnation or an adverse sentence. It covers concepts of judgment and punishment, particularly in a legal context. The New Testament references it in Romans, emphasizing its use in discussions of condemnation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† κατά-κριμα, -τος, τό

(< κατακρίνω),

penalty (RV, condemnation; but cf. Deiss., BS, 264 f.; MM, Exp., xv): Ro 5:16, 18 8:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά-κριμα, -ros, τό, (Katakpivw), damnalory sentence, condemnation: Ro. ν. 16 (on which see κρίμα, 2), ib. 18; Vili. 1. (κατακριμάτων ἀφέσεις, Dion. Hal. 6, 61.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατάκριμα. Deissmann (2S p. 264f.) quotes several passages from CPR I. where he thinks the word must be understood technically to denote ‘‘a burden ensuing from a judicial pronouncement—a servitude,” as in 51 (4.p. 83-4) where a piece of land is transferred to the purchaser καθαρὰ ἀπὸ παντὸς ὀφειλήματος ἀπὸ μὲν δημοσίων τελεσμάτων πάντων καὶ [ἑτέρων εἰἸδῶν καὶ ἀρταβίων καὶ ναυβίων καὶ ἀριθμητικῶν καὶ ἐπιβολῆς κώμης καὶ κατακριμάτων πάντων καὶ παντὸς εἴδους, and 1884f (4.p. 105-6) where in a deed of sale similar expressions occur. To these exx. we may add P

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατάκριμα (katakrima) — condemnation.

κατά-κρῐμα, ατος, τό,

condemnation, judgement, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. punishment, fine, damage, [NT+1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατάκριμα

katakrima

from 2632; an adverse sentence (the verdict):--condemnation.

see GREEK for 2632

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατάκριμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

punishment following condemnation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατάκριμα katakrima 3x

punishment, condemnation, condemning sentence, Rom. 5:16, 18; 8:1*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κατάκριμα κατάκρι^μα, ατος, τό, condemnation, judgment, NTest.

from κατακρί_νω

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The sentence of God against sin

Mt 25:41

- Universal, caused by the offence of Adam

Ro 5:12,16,18

- Inseparable consequence of sin

Pr 12:2; Ro 6:23

- INCREASED BY

. Impenitence

Mt 11:20-24

. Unbelief

Joh 3:18,19

. Pride

1Ti 3:6

. Oppression

Jas 5:1-5

. Hypocrisy

Mt 23:14

- Conscience testifies to the justice of

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%condemnation
condemnation100% · 3×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial67%subject33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰς
εἷςoneἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
νῦνnow, already, at pre
ἄραDisj
κατάκριμαcondemnation,
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheἐν
οὕτωthus, so, in this ma
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατάκριμα · 3× in the New Testament
Romans
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
τὸho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
δὲde however G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέhowever2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
χάρισμαcharisma the gift G5486 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A gift or spiritual endowment, as in Romans 1:11 and 1 Corinthians 12:4. This word describes a divine gratuity or extraordinary operation of the Spirit, including spiritual qualifications and miraculous faculties.
Amplified meaning
spiritual endowment, unmerited favor
Tyndale gloss
gift
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word χάρισμα (charisma) is derived from χαρίζομαι and refers to a gift of grace or a free gift, particularly in the context of spiritual endowments in the New Testament. It encompasses extraordinary operations of the Spirit and various spiritual graces, as seen in passages like Romans and 1 Corinthians. The lexicons note its use in both a general sense of favor and a specific Pauline context of divine gifts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† χάρισμα, -τος, τό

(< χαρίζομαι)

[in LXX: Si 7:33א(AB, χάρις) 38:30 Bl(אAB2R, χρῖσμα) * ;]

a gift of grace, a free gift, esp. of extra­ordinary operations of the Spirit in the Apostolic Church, but including all spiritual graces and endowments (Lft., Notes, 148 f.): Ro 1:11 5:15, 16 6:23 11:29 12:6, I Co 1:7 7:7 12:4, 9, 28, 30, 31, II Co 1:11, I Ti 4:14, II Ti 1:6, I Pe 4:10.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χάρισμα, -τος, τό, (χαρίζομαι), a gift of grace; a favor which one receives without any merit of his own; in the N. T. [where (exe. 1 Pet. iv. 10) used only by Paul] the giftcf divine grace (so also in Philo de alleg. legg. iii. § 24 fin. δωρεὰ καὶ εὐεργεσία καὶ χάρισμα θεοῦ τὰ πάντα ὅσα ev κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ κόσμος ἐστίν) ; used of the natural gift of continence, due to the grace of God as creator, 1 Co. vii. 7; deliverance from great peril to life, τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς x. bestowed upon us, 2 Co. i. 11; the gift of faith, knowledge, holiness, virtue, Ro. i. 11; the economy of divine grace, by which the pardon of sin and eternal salvation is appointed to sinners in consideration of the merits of Christ laid hold of by faith, Ro. v. 15 sq. ; vi. 23; plur. of the several blessings of the Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 29; in the technical Pauline sense χαρίσματα [ A. V. gifis| denote extraordinary…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χάρισμα μῆτερ, ἐπὶ τῇ σπουδῇ τοῦ καθεδραρίου (““ stool”), ἐκομισάμὴν γὰρ αὐτό, and the constantly recurring χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς, as in P Petr I. 295 (iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski’, p. 30) χάρις τοῖς θεζοδῖς πολλή, εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, P Hib I. 79° (c. B.C. 260) εἰ ἔρρωσαι . . . εἴζηΣ ἂν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω καὶ τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ χά[ρι]ς, ‘if you are well, it would be as I wish, and much gratitude would be due to the gods” (Edd.), BGU IIT. 843° (i/ii A.D.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς ἱκάμζην eis] ᾿Αλεξανδρίαν, P Fay 12415 (ii/a.p.) toi[s] Qfeo]i[s] ἐστίι]ν χάρις ὅτι οὐδεμία ἐστὶν πρόλημψις ἡμεῖν γεγενημένη, ‘thank heaven, there is no preconceived principle on our part” (Edd.), PSII. 945 (ii/A.D.) θεοῖς δὲ χάρις ὅτι ἤρεσε καὶ TO παιδὶ ἡ ποδίς, καὶ προσεδρεύει is τὰ μαθήματα, P Giss I. 17° (time of Hadrian) (= Chrest. I. p. 566) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πᾶσι ὅτι σε διαφυλάσσουσι ἀπρόσκοπον, and the Christian P Oxy VI. 9395 (iv/a.p.)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χάρισμα (charisma) — gift.

χᾰρ-ισμα, ατος, τό,

grace, favour, θεοῦ [Refs 1st c.AD+]; especially in NT, gift of God's grace, [NT]; opposed to ὀψώνια, [NT]; later, generally, favour bestowed, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χάρισμα

charisma

from 5483; a (divine) gratuity, i.e. deliverance (from danger or

passion); (specially), a (spiritual) endowment, i.e. (subjectively)

religious qualification, or (objectively) miraculous faculty:--(free)

gift.

see GREEK for 5483

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χάρισμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

an undeserved favor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χάρισμα charisma 17x

a free favor, free gift, Rom. 5:15, 16; 6:23; 2 Cor. 1:11; benefit, Rom. 1:11; a divinely conferred endowment, 1 Cor. 12:4, 9, 28, 30, 31

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χάρισμα χάρισμα, ατος, τό, χαρίζομαι a grace, favour: a free gift, gift of God's grace, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gift (mattanah, minchah, shochadh; doron, dorea, chairisma): In Ge 25:6; Ex 28:38; Nu 18:6,7,29; Eze 20:26, etc., mattanah, "a gift," is so rendered; minchah, an offering or present, used especially of the "meat offerings," is translated "gift" (2Sa 8:2,6 the King James Version; 2Ch 26:8), in which passages "tribute" is meant, as the Revised Version (British and American); 32:23; Ps 45:12. A few other words occur singly, e.g. 'eshkar, "a reward" (Ps 72:10)…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Gift

(1.) An gratuity (Prov. 19:6) to secure favour (18:16; 21:14), a thank-offering (Num. 18:11), or a dowry (Gen. 34:12).

(2.) An oblation or proppitatory gift (2Sa 8:2,6; 1Ch 18:2,6; 2Ch 26:8; Ps. 45:12; 72:10).

(3.) A bribe to a judge to obtain a favourable verdict (Ex. 23:8; Deut. 16:19).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The giving and receiving of presents has in all ages been not only a more frequent but also a more formal and significant proceeding in the East than among ourselves. We cannot adduce a more remarkable proof of the important part which presents play in the social life of the East than the fact that the Hebrew language possesses no less than fifteen different expressions for the one idea. The mode of presentation was with as much parade as possible. The refusal of a present was regarded us a high indignity. No less an insult was it not to bring a present when the position of the parties demanded it. (1 Samuel 10:27)

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
53%gift
gift53% · 9×gifts41% · 7×grace bestowed6% · 1×

17 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object53%subject41%adverbial6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἔχωI have, hold, poδιαίρεσιςdivision, distri
Article the
καίand, even, also,γάρforδέbut, on the othe
μεταδίδωμιI share, impart
τὶς
μηδείςno one, nothing
ἐν
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ἴδιοςone’s own, priva
χάρισμαthe gift17×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godμέγας
ἐκ
πολύςmuch, many, ofteθεόςGod, a god
ἴαμαhealing, curing
ἐνἀντίλημψιςhelp, ministrati
σύ
πνευματικόςspiritual
εἰCond
γάρfor

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχάρισμα · 17× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Romans 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.78c. AD 40

ζητῶν ὁ δίκαιος τὴν τῶν ὄντων φύσιν ἓν τοῦτο εὑρίσκει ἄριστον εὕρημα, χάριν ὄντα τοῦ θεοῦ τὰ σύμπαντα, γενέσεως δὲ οὐδὲν χάρισμα, ὅτι γε οὐδὲ κτῆμα, θεοῦ δὲ κτῆμα τὰ πάντα, διὸ καὶ μόνου τὴν χάριν οἰκεῖον·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 38.1c. AD 96

Σωζέσθω οὖν ἡμῶν ὅλον τὸ σῶμα ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ ὑποτασσέσθω ἕκαστος τῷ πλησίον αὐτοῦ, καθὼς ἐτέθη ἐν τῷ χαρίσματι αὐτοῦ.

The DidacheThe Didache 1.5c. AD 100

παντὶ τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου καὶ μὴ ἀπαίτει: πᾶσι γὰρ θέλει δίδοσθαι ὁ πατὴρ ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων χαρισμάτων.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Oxy. 33 2673Chysis (Oxyrhynchites)AD 304

μήτε ἀργύριον μήτε ἐσθῆτα μήτε τετράποδα μήτε ἀνδράποδα μήτε οἰκόπεδα μήτε ὑπάρχοντα μήτε ἀπὸ χαρισμάτων μηδʼ αὖ ἀπὸ διαθηκῶν εἰ μὴ μόνην τὴν εὑρεθεῖσαν χαλκῆν πύλην καὶ παραδοθεῖσαν τῷ

P.Neph. 31Herakleopolites (?)AD 335

πάσης βεβαιώσεως ἀπʼ ὀφειλῆς καὶ κατοχῆς πάσης καὶ ἄνευ τινὸς ἀμφιλογίας καὶ εὑρεσιλογίας … χαρισμα … εν καθαρὸν γραφὲν πανταχοῦ ἐπιφερόμενον ἐφʼ ὑπογραφῆς τοῦ ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ ὑπογράψαντος

BGU 4 1044AD 301–AD 400

Σαραπάμμωνι γραμματεῦσιν καὶ τοῖς κωμάρχοις Ἀπφοῦς χαίρειν. πολλάκις γὰρ τιμῶ ὑμᾶς καὶ οἴδατε τὰ χαρίσματα ἃ πεποίηκα ὑμῖν. εἷς λεγόμενος Φαῆσις ἐργάτης ἐμοῦ ἐστιν συμπληροῦσθαι τὸ λειτούργημα αὐτοῦ. ὑπὸ

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
ἐκek [is] out of G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκ[is] out of913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
πολλῶνpolus many G4183 Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means much or many, and is used to describe things like large crowds, as in Mark 5:24, or a great amount of time, as in Matthew 25:19. It emphasizes the magnitude of something.
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πολύς (polus) means much or many, covering a range of contexts from quantity to degree and value. It appears as an adjective and can also function as a noun or adverb. In the New Testament, it is used to describe large numbers of people or things, as seen in verses like Matthew 9:37 and John 6:10. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ,

[in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms;]

as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Ac 11:21; ὄχλος, Mk 5:24; θερισμός, Mt 9:37; χόρτος, Jo 6:10; χρόνος, Mt 25:19; γογγυσμός, Jo 7:12; πόνος, Col 4:13; δόξα, Mt 24:30; σιγή, Ac 21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mt 13:17; ὄχλοι, Mt 4:25; δαιμόνια, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πολύς (polus) — much.

πολύς,

Attic dialect πολλή, πολ; genitive πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dative πολλῷ, ῇ, ; accusative πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—Ionic dialect πολλός [Refs 6th c.BC+], πολλή, πολλόν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses the Ionic dialect forms, but codices have πολύν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—both sets of forms are found in Epic dialect, also genitive singular πολέος [Refs 8th c.BC+], once contraction πολεῖς [Refs]; dative πολέσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative πολέας (trisyllable) [Refs 8th c.BC+] (frequently with variant{πολεῖς} [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Epic dialect πολέες is used as feminine, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect also have πουλύς (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; these forms are found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] — Lyric poetry and Trag. (Lyric poetry) sometimes use Epic dialect forms, dative singular…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

Adj

much, many, often

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πολύς the ionic declension πολλός, ή, όν is retained by the attic in all cases, except the nom. and acc. masc. and neut. Hom. uses both ionic and attic forms. of Number, many, opp. to ὀλίγος, Hom., etc.;— with nouns of multitude, πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.; πολλὸν πλῆθος Hdt., etc.:—also of anything often repeated, πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος id. Hdt.; πολλὸς αἰνεόμενος id. Hdt.; τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ often, Dem.

of Size, Degree, Force, much, mighty, great, Il., etc.; π. ὕπνος deep sleep, Od.; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il., etc.:—rarely of a single person, μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.; ἢν πολλῇ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, Eur.; πολλῷ ῥέοντι Dem.; from the wind, πολὺς ἔπνει was blowing strong, id. Dem.; often with a Partic., πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GPN — Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

MANY, adjective men'ny.

1. Numerous; comprising a great number of individuals.

Thou shalt be a father of many nations. Genesis 17:4.

Not many wise men after the flesh, not many mighty, not many noble, are called. 1 Corinthians 1:26.

MANY are the afflictions of the righteous. Psalms 34:12.

It is often preceded by as or so, and followed by so, indicating an equal number.

As many books as you take, so many shall be charged to your account.

So many laws argue so many sins.

It is followed by as.

As many as were willing-hearted brought bracelets. Exodus 34:1.

It precedes an or a, before a noun in the singular number.

Full many a gem of purest ray serene.

2. In low language, preceded by too, it denotes powerful or much; as, they are too many for us.

MANY, noun men'ny. A multitude; a great number of individuals; the people.

O thou fond many

The vulgar and the many are fit only to be led or driven.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%many
many52% · 196×great17% · 66×much17% · 65×many things6% · 21×other renderings6% · 23×other renderings2% · 7×

378 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%adverbial29%object22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 354 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅςεἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἀπώλειαdestruction, ruiἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
ὄχλοςa crowd
αὐτόςὁράωI see, look uponκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὁράωI see, look uponμετά
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἀκολουθέωI accompany, attλαλέωI speak, say
πολύςmany413×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπρῶτοςfirst, beforeσυναναβαίνωI go up with
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howθεραπεύωI care for, atteεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existἐκτέραςa wonder, porten
γάρfor
ἔρχομαιI come, goεἰμίI am, existπάσχωI am acted upon,
μᾶλλονmore, rather
Article theκράζωI cry aloud, shrσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπολύς · 413× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark Matthew John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 335 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

τῶι προγεγραμμένωι ἱερῶι, ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

νυνὶ παρεφεδρευόντων ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους

μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον καὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου αὐτοῦ παραδείσου καὶ φρεάτων καὶ ἐποικίων καὶ ληνῶνος καὶ γῆς

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
παραπτωμάτωνparaptōma trespasses G3900 Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A trespass or unintentional error, like in Matthew 6:14-15. It describes a misdeed or sin, like in Romans 4:25 and 5:15.
Amplified meaning
unintentional errors, willful sins
Tyndale gloss
trespass
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παράπτωμα (i.e., *paraptoma*) is derived from the verb παραπίπτω and generally refers to a false step, transgression, or misdeed. It encompasses both unintentional errors and willful sins, appearing in various New Testament contexts such as Matthew and Romans. The lexicons suggest it is synonymous with ἁμαρτία (i.e., *hamartia*), but they note subtle differences in usage.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἁμαρτία, ἁμάρτημα, παρακοή, ἀνομία, παρανομία, παράβασις, παράπτωμα, ἀγνόημα, ἥττημα from a scan

παράβασις, παράπτωμα, ἀγνόημα, ἥττημα. A MOURNFULLY numerous group of words, and one which it would be only too easy to make larger still. Nor is it hard to see why. For sin, which we may define in the 240 SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. ϑιυχνι. language of Augustine, as ‘ factum vel dictuin yel concuvitum aliquid contra eternam legem’ (Con. Faust. xxii. 27; cf. the Stoic definition, ἁμάρτημα, νόμου ἀπαγόρευμα, Plutarch, De Rep. Stoic. 11); or again, ‘ voluntas admittendi vel retinendi quod justitia vetat, et unde liberum est abstinere’ (Con. Jul. i. 47), may be regarded under an infinite number of aspects, and in all languages has been so regarded; and as the diagnosis of it belongs most of all to the Scriptures, nowhere else are we likely to find it contemplated on so many sides, set forth under such various images. It may be regarded as the missing of a mark or aim; it is then ἁμαρτία…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† παρά-πτωμα, -τος, τό

(< παραπίπτω),

[in LXX for מַעַל, פֶּשַׁע, etc.;]

a false step, a blunder (Polyb.).

Ethically, a misdeed, trespass (LXX): Mt 6:14, 15, Mk 11:25, 26, Ro 4:25 5:15 ff. Ro 11:11, 12, II Co 5:19, Ga 6:1, Eph 1:7 2:1, 5, Col 2:13.†

SYN.: v.s. ἁμαρτία.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά-πτωμα, -τος, τό, (παραπίπτω, q-V-); 1. prop. a fall beside or near something ; but nowhere found in this sense. 2. trop. a lapse or deviation from truth and uprightness; a sin, misdeed, [R. V. trespass, ‘ differing from ἁμάρτημα (q. v.) in figure not in force’ (Fritzsche) ; cf. Trench § Ixvi.]: Mt. vi. 14,[15*G T om. WH br.], 15°; xviii. 35 Rec.; Mk. xi. 25,26 RGL; Ro. iv. 25; v. 15-18, 20; xi. 11sq.; 2Co. v.19; Gal. vi. 1; Eph. i. 7; ii. 1,5; Col. ii. 13; Jas. v. 16 (where LT Tr WH ἁμαρτίας). (Polyb. 9, 10,6; Sap. iii. 13; x. 1; Sept. several times for Syn, oy, pws, ete.; of literary faults, Longin. 36, 2.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παράπτωμα. In the royal ordinance P Tebt I. 5% (B.c. 118) it is laid down that the measures used by revenue officers shall be tested, and that they must not exceed the government measure by more than the two [ . .] allowed for errors, τῶν εἰς τὰ παραπτώματα ἐ[π]ικεχωρημένῳϊν.. B: the editors suggest two hundredths of a χοῖνιξ. A “slip” or “lapse” rather than a wilful ‘‘sin” is: the connotation Part VI.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράπτωμα (paraptōma) — trespass.

παρά-πτωμα, ατος, τό,

false step, slip, blunder, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

2. defeat, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. transgression, trespass, [LXX+NT]

4. error in amount of payments, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράπτωμα

paraptoma

from 3895; a side-slip (lapse or deviation), i.e. (unintentional)

error or (wilful) transgression:--fall, fault, offence, sin, trespass.

see GREEK for 3895

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράπτωμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a falling away, sin

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράπτωμα paraptōma 19x

pr. a stumbling aside, a false step; in NT a trespass, fault, offence, transgression, Mt. 6:14, 15; Mk. 11:25, 26; Rom. 4:25; a fall in faith, Rom. 11:11, 12

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράπτωμα παρά-πτωμα, ατος, τό, παραπίπτω a false step, a transgression, trespass, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPN — Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%trespasses
trespasses59% · 13×trespass36% · 8×transgressions5% · 1×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial47%object32%subject16%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
νεκρόςdead, a corpseἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἀφίημιI send away, rel
εἷςone
Article theδιά
πολύςmuch, many, often
ἐκ
αὐτός
Article the
τὶς
ἐν
παράπτωμαtrespasses19×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἀφίημιI send away, relπλοῦτοςriches, wealthκαίand, even, also,
σύ
Article the
Article the
πολύςmuch, many, ofteθάνατοςdeathσωτηρίαdeliverance, sal
εἰς
δικαίωμαa thing pronouncπᾶςall, the whole,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαράπτωμα · 19× in the New Testament
Romans Ephesians Colossians Matthew 2 Corinthians Galatians Mark
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 170c. AD 40

ἀλλὰ γὰρ δέος ἐστὶν ἀναβαίνειν πρὸς τὴν τοῦ ὄντος θέαν ψυχῇ δι’ ἑαυτῆς ἀγνοούσῃ τὴν ὁδόν, ὑπὸ ἀμαθίας ἅμα καὶ τόλμης ἐπαρθείσῃ — μεγάλα δὲ τὰ ἐξ ἀνεπιστημοσύνης καὶ πολλοῦ θράσους παραπτώματα —·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.4c. AD 100

οὐ λήμψῃ πρόσωπον ἐλέγξαι τινὰ ἐπὶ παραπτώματι.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 2.6c. AD 96

ἐπὶ τοῖς παραπτώμασιν τῶν πλησίον ἐπενθεῖτε: τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1917Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

Φαμενώθ, καὶ ὅτε δὲ ἐξέβην ἄπηλθα εἰς τὸ … ς, καὶ νῦν βέβηκέ μοι παράπτωμα διαβολικόν. πᾶν οὖν ποίησον, ἀγαπητὲ γνησιώτατε καὶ ἀξιώτατε παρὰ κυρίῳ θεῷ, μετὰ σπουδῆς φιλοξενίας

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
εἰςeis unto G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςunto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And [is] not as through one having sinned the gift; That indeed for judgment [was] of one [was] unto condemnation, <the> however the gift [is] out of many trespasses unto justification.
δικαίωμα.¶dikaiōma justification. G1345 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A righteous act is doing what is fair and just, like following God's laws. In Romans 1:32, it refers to God's ordinances. In Luke 1:6, it describes Zechariah's obedience to God's laws.
Amplified meaning
righteousness, acquittal
Tyndale gloss
righteous act
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δικαίωμα (dikaiōma) is derived from the verb δικαιόω and refers to a concrete expression of righteousness or justice. It encompasses meanings such as an ordinance, judgment, or a righteous act, with references in the New Testament including Romans and Luke. The term can signify both acquittal and condemnation, highlighting its legal implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δικαίωμα, -τος, τ

(< δικαιόω),

[in LXX most freq. for חֹק, in Ez, chiefly for מִשְׁפָּט, in Pss, τὰ δ., freq. for פּׅקּוּדִים ;]

a concrete expression of righteousness, the expression and result of the act of δικαίωσις, "a declaration that a thing is δίκαιον, or that a person is δίκαιος," hence,

an ordinance: δ. τ. θεοῦ, Ro 1:32; τ. κυρίου, Lk 1:6; τ. νόμου, Ro 2:26 8:4; λατρείας, He 9:1; σαρκός, He 9:10;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δικαίωμα, -ros, τό, (fr. δικαιόω ; ὃ δεδικαίωται or τὸ δεδιkatwpevov), Sept. very often for pn, apn, and vawn; for msn, Deut. xxx. 16; 1 K. ii. 3; plur. occasionally for DNpd; 1. that which has ξέρη deemed right so as to have the force of law; a. what has been established and ordained by law, an ordinance: univ. of an appointment of God having the force of law, Ro. i. 32; plur. used of the divine precepts of the Mosaic law: τοῦ κυρίου, Lk. i. 6; τοῦ νόμου, Ro. ii. 26; τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου, collectively, of the (moral) precepts of the same law, Ro. viii. 4; δικαιώματα λατρείας, precepts concerning the public worship of God, Heb. ix. 1; δικαιώματα σαρκός, laws respecting bodily purity [(?) ef. vii. 16], ibid. vs. 10. b. a judicial decision, sentence; of God —either the favorable judgment by which he acquits men and declares them acceptable to him, Ro. v. 16; or unfavorable: sentence of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δικαίωμα. In P Του]. rit 22 (p.c. 117) δικαιώματα means apparently ‘arguments of counsel ἡ παραγινωσκομένων αὐτοῖς ἐξ ὧν παρέκειντο δικαιωμάτων ὧν ἑκάτερος ἡρεῖτο : so* and ἡ. * ἐπελθὼν δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου δικαιώματα. Similarly in OG/S 13'4 (early iii/B.c.) when the people of Priene proved their immemorial possession of certain territory ἔκ τε tay ἱστοριῶν κ[αὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων μαρτυριῶν Kal δικαιωμάtov [με]τὰ τῶν ἑξετῶν [σπονδῶν, the meaning ‘‘awards” would seem to be possible, but ‘‘arguments” suits μαρτυpiav better. Bishop Hicks’s notes (A¢storical Inscrr p. 260) will show the stages in this centuries-old dispute. P Lille I. 2975 (from a code——iii/B.c.) prescribes examination of slaves by torture ἐὰμ μὴ ἐκ τῶν τεθέντων δικαιωμάτων δύνωνται κρίνειν, ‘‘si les piéces du proces ne leur permettent pas de juger” (Ed.). Cf P Petr II. 38 (c)® (iii/p.c.) (= III. p. 55), where a man is…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δικαίωμα (dikaiōma) — righteous act.

δῐκαί-ωμα, ατος, τό,

act of right, opposed to ἀδίκημα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; duty, τὰ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους δ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; properly amendment of a wrong, opposed to δικαιοπράγημα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__a judgement, penalty, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b justification, plea of right, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; δικαιώματα Ἑλληνίδων πόλεων, compiled by [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__c plural, pleadings, documents in a suit, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; also, credentials, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

__d act of δικαίὠσις [NT]

II. ordinance, decree, [LXX+NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δικαίωμα

dikaioma

from 1344; an equitable deed; by implication, a statute or

decision:--judgment, justification, ordinance, righteousness.

see GREEK for 1344

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δικαίωμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a thing pronounced to be just

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δικαίωμα dikaiōma 10x

pr. a rightful act, act of justice, equity; a sentence, of condemnation, Rev. 15:4; in NT, of acquittal, justification, Rom. 5:16; a decree, law, ordinance, Lk. 1:6; Rom. 1:32; 2:26; 8:4; Heb. 9:1, 10; a meritorious act, an instance of perfect righteousness, Rom. 5:18; Rev. 19:8*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δικαίωμα ndi^kaiw ma_matos neut from δι^καιόω an act by which wrong is set right: —a judgment, punishment, penalty, Plat.

a plea of right, Thuc.: justification, NTest.: and

an ordinance, decree, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

jus-ti-fi-ka'-shun (tsedheq, verb tsadheq; Septuagint and New Testament dikaioma, dikaiosis, verb dikaioo, "justification" "to justify," in a legal sense, the declaring just or righteous. In Biblical literature, dikaioun, without denying the real righteousness of a person, is used invariably or almost invariably in a declarative or forensic sense. See Simon, HDB, II, 826; Thayer, Grimm, and Cremer under the respective words):

I. THE WRITINGS OF PAUL

1. Universality of Sin

2. Perfection of the Law of God

3. Life, Work and Death of the Atoning Saviour

(1) Paul's Own Experience

(2) The Resurrection Connected with the Death

(3) Faith, Not Works, the Means of Justification

(4) Baptism Also Eliminated

(5) Elements of Justification

(a) Forgiveness of Sins

(b) Declaring or Approving as Righteous

(6) Justification Has to Do with the Individual

II. THE OTHER NEW TESTAMENT WRITINGS

1. The Synoptic Gospels

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Justification

A forensic term, opposed to condemnation. As regards its nature, it is the judicial act of God, by which he pardons all the sins of those who believe in Christ, and accounts, accepts, and treats them as righteous in the eye of the law, i.e., as conformed to all its demands. In addition to the pardon (q.v.) of sin, justification declares that all the claims of the law are satisfied in respect of the justified. It is the act of a judge and not of a sovereign. The law is not relaxed or set aside, but is declared to be fulfilled in the strictest sense; and so the person justified is declared to be entitled to all the advantages and rewards arising from perfect obedience to the law (Rom. 5:1-10).

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ge 15:6; Ps 32:2; 71:16; 89:16; Isa 42:21; 45:24,25; 46:12,13; 50:8; 51:5,6; 53:11; 54:17; 56:1; 61:10; Jer 23:6; Hab 2:4; Zec 3:4; Joh 5:24; Ac 13:39; Ro 1:16,17; 2:13; 3:21,22,24-26,28,30; 4:3-25; 5:1,9,11-21; 6:22; 7:1-25; 8:1,30,31,33,34; 9:30-32; 10:1-21; 1Co 1:30; 6:11;

(1) By Faith

Ge 15:6; Ac 13:39; Ro 3:28; 5:1; 5:18; 9:30; 1Co 6:11

Ga 3:24

--SEE Faith (3), FAITH

Salvation (3), SALVATION

Grace (3), GRACE, DIVINE

(2) Of Self Impossible

Job 9:2; 25:4; Ps 143:2; Jer 2:22; Eze 14:14; Ro 3:20; Ga 5:4

--SEE Good Works, WORK AND WORKERS, RELIGIOUS

Grace, GRACE, DIVINE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%ordinances
ordinances20% · 2×righteous acts20% · 2×righteous decree10% · 1×requirements10% · 1×justification10% · 1×act of righteousness10% · 1×righteousness10% · 1×regulations10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial30%object30%subject20%predicate20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ὅστιςἀκροβυστίαforeskinἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐντολήan ordinance, in
εἰς
παράπτωμαa falling away,
εἷςone
διά
πρῶτοςfirst, before
Article the
δικαίωμαjustification.10×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiκύριοςlord, Lord, mastθεόςGod, a god
εἰς
πᾶςall, the whole,
λατρείαservice, worship
Article the
σάρξflesh, body
μέχριas far as, until
σύ
φανερόωI make clear, vi

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδικαίωμα · 10× in the New Testament
Romans Hebrews Revelation Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 77 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 67c. AD 40

„δηλώσουσι τὰ δικαιώματά σου Ἰακὼβ καὶ τὸν νόμον σου Ἰσραήλ“ (Deut.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 17.108c. AD 75–95

καίτοι γε οὐχ οὕτως θαυμάζειν τῶν προτέρων τὴν ἀβουλίαν, νεωτέρους γὰρ καὶ κακίᾳ συμβούλων διεφθαρμένους ἀπαλεῖψαι τὰ τῆς φύσεως δικαιώματα ἀρχῆς θᾶσσον ἢ χρῆν μεταποιεῖσθαι σπουδάσαντας,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.1c. AD 100

Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC

κϛ … Τραιανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου ἕως τοῦ αὐτοῦ … ος. ἃ δὲ παρέθεντο δικαιώματα κασσίῳ … λου ἐπιτρόπῳ Σεβαστοῦ ἑκάστῳ ονόματι παράκειται … Ἀρσινοείτου δοῦλοι Μάρκου Αἰμιλλίου

P.Hamb. 1 31 aArsinoites (?)AD 126–AD 138

Παχὼν κζ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος … ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ. ἃ δὲ παρέθεντο δικαιώματα τῷ δεῖνι ἐπάρχῳ εἴλης Ἀπριανῆς, ἑκάστῳ ὀνόματι παράκειται. μεθʼ ἕτερα σελίδων … . Γάιος

BGU 1 113AD 140

ἐνεστῶτος γ ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τίτου Αἰλίου Ἁδριανοῦ Ἀντωνείνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς. ἃ δὲ παρέθεντο δικαιώματα … ιωνατ … χιλιάρχῳ λεγιῶνος β Τραιανῆς Ἰσχυρᾶς, ἑκάστῳ ὀνόματι παράκειται. μεθʼ ἕτερα σελίδων

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate